Pacifica
OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................189
5
SAFETY ........................................................................219
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................317
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................441
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................507
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................569
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................581
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................693
12
INDEX..........................................................................699
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Exterior Mirrors
4 — Doors
5 — Wheels/Tires
6 — Headlights
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Tail Lamps
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Multifunction Lever 9 — Switch Panel
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 10 — Electronic Park Brake Switch
3 — Instrument Cluster 11 — Gear Selector
4 — Windshield Wiper Lever 12 — Ignition
5 — Uconnect System 13 — Speed Controls
6 — Glove Compartment 14 — Steering Wheel
7 — Front Center Stack AUX Jack and USB Port 15 — Hood Release
8 — Climate Controls 16 — Headlight Switch
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches
2 — Door Handles
3 — Seats
4 — Storage Compartment
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .......18
䡵 KEYS .................................20
▫ KeyFob..............................20
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................28
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ..............28
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................30
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped ....31
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................32
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .33
▫ General Information .....................33
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................33
▫ Key Programming ......................34
▫ Replacement Keys .......................34
▫ General Information .....................34
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .35
▫ To Arm The System .....................35
▫ To Disarm The System ...................35
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................36
䡵 DOORS ...............................36
▫ Manual Lock ...........................36
▫ Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped ..........39
▫ Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped .............................39
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........39
3
▫ Manual Sliding Side Door..................43
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .......45
▫ Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped.......47
▫ Child Locks............................48
䡵 SEATS ................................50
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .50
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............52
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .73
▫ Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped . .75
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........79
▫ Heated Seats ...........................81
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ..............83
▫ Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If Equipped. .84
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks...........84
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................85
▫ Head Restraints — Front Seats ..............85
▫ Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats .....87
▫ Head Restraints — Second Row Bench.........87
▫ Head Restraints — Third Row ..............88
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................90
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............90
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ........91
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................92
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......92
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....92
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................93
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped .............................93
▫ Conversation Mirror .....................94
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............94
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ............95
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............95
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped ...........95
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.........95
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....96
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................97
▫ Multifunction Lever ......................97
▫ Headlight Switch ........................97
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......98
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ...................98
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........98
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................99
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........99
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped .....99
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped .............99
▫ Lights-On Reminder ....................100
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ............100
▫ Turn Signals ..........................100
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........101
▫ Battery Protection ......................101
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS ......................101
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting ................101
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ........104
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ..............104
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .........106
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer ..................107
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................108
▫ Manual Climate Controls Overview .........108
▫ Automatic Uconnect 4 Climate Control
Overview ............................121
▫ Automatic Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate Control
Overview ............................122
▫ Climate Control Functions.................134
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ............................135
▫ Operating
Tips ........................136
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
䡵 WINDOWS ............................138
▫ Power Windows........................138
䡵 PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....141
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................142
▫ Closing Sunroof ........................143
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................143
▫ Power Sun Shade — If Equipped............143
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................144
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................144
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................144
䡵 HOOD ...............................145
▫ Opening .............................145
▫ Closing ..............................146
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................146
▫ Opening .............................146
▫ Closing .............................147
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............148
▫ Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ..........150
▫ Cargo Area Features ....................152
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....160
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......163
▫ Using HomeLink .......................164
▫ Security..............................165
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................165
▫ General Information .....................166
䡵 INTERNAL
EQUIPMENT ..................166
▫ Storage ..............................166
▫ Sun Screens — If Equipped ................173
▫ Power Outlets .........................174
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............177
▫ Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped .......177
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ..............179
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped ........179
▫ Overhead Sunglass Storage ...............180
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......180
▫ Deploying The Crossbars .................181
▫ Stowing The Crossbars ...................183
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If
Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle
is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Up-
dated in real-time
Available when and where
you need it
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface
Maintenance schedules
and information
Multilingual
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system uses a receiver module
in the vehicle that wirelessly links with the key fob.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm, optional power liftgate,
left power sliding door, and right power sliding door from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob.
When any button on the key fob is pushed, or when any
signal is being transferred between the key fob and the
vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will flash as an
indicator. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with
you when valet parking.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring
to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
NOTE:
• A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED
light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer
illuminates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
• The key fob LED light brightness is designed for indoor
light viewing, so the LED light may not be visible in
direct sunlight.
In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted, a
back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the
Emergency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
Key Fob
1 — Lock
2 — Remote Start
3 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
4 — PANIC Alarm
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
7 — Liftgate
8 — Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Unlock The Doors
NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver’s side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the default setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver front door and sliding door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will be activated.
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
First Push Unlock
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side doors or all doors on the first push of the
unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry; refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The key fob also contains an emergency key. The emer-
gency key is stored in the bottom of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical button
on the side of the key fob with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand while pushing
the mechanical button.
Second Push Unlock Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash once and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal. Settings in
radio can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
Key
If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open, the
doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the
key is inside the passenger compartment.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old batter-
ies by placing them in correct containers according to the
law or by taking them to a dealership, where they will be
handled appropriately.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechanical
release button on the side of the key fob with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the tip of your
emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully
pry on both sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove
the back cover from the fob being careful not to damage
any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward in its
pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the depleted
battery from the battery pocket and dispose appropri-
ately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the positive (+)
side is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket
until it is firmly seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and snap
it back in place by pushing it against the fob until it is
seated all around.
Emergency Key Removal Separating The Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to
customize vehicle settings that can be applied to determine
the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The
vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN,
which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the spe-
cific settings for the first time.
This feature also has additional features that are always
enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set
by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in use,
the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized
vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver
alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the
driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense
mode when the KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
• Unique splash screen graphic
• Telltale
illuminated
• After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed
The following features are always enabled when this key is
in use:
• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied Seat
Belts are not Fastened
• Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime
• Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
• Daytime Running Lights
• Headlights with Wipers
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Auto Dim High Beams
For additional information please refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
KeySense Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle with the
push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the passenger
compartment, and the drivers foot on the brake pedal.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ACC
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the vehicle.
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition position or
from a remote start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Backup Starting Method
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting The
Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional
heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control,
vented seats (if equipped) are also activated in tempera-
tures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats,
and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below
40° F (4.4° C). These features will stay on through the
duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another
vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power
liftgate are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides
both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system
is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive En-
try⬙ under ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Hands Free Liftgate passive entry activation (if
equipped with Hands Free Liftgate passive entry).
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/STOP
button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Door Lock Location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
Manual Door Lock Rocker Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing
the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will
allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is
open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the OFF
position and remove the key fob.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will
occur only after the gear selector has been placed into the
PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear
selector has been placed out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door locks
(lock or unlock).
For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 — Power Unlock Switch
2 — Power Lock Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside
using the hands free or Passive Entry system.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, wireless charging pad, or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
• If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, unlock-
ing with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for the
time 0, 30(default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry also
initiates two flashes of the turn lamps.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door
handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to unlock the
drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. The
interior door panel rocker knob will rotate when the door
is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of the
driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger
door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to
unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In Vehicle
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door
is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
key fob inside the car, and it does not find any key fob
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid key fob
is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle
the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is programmed,
only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release
handle is pulled. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
liftgate release handle is pulled. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver or passenger front door handle, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button, or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual Sliding Side Door
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open
latch in order to close the door.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the follow-
ing guidelines:
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening
the door. This is very important when your vehicle is
parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the
downhill direction.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in
several ways:
• Key fob
• Inside or outside handles
• Buttons located:
– In the overhead console
– Just inside the sliding door
– On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding
door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate
the door when the door is locked. All other ways require
the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped
with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the outside
handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and
open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to
avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors
from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off
button, located in the overhead console, to remove power
to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors.
The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit
when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing
the power sliding door power off button will return the
handles to power operation.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position and an audible
tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.
• If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in
the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is
clear before closing the door.
WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indica-
tor. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the sliding door open while driving.
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in
and out kicking motion under the vehicle in the general
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
Hands-Free Sliding Doors
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
location below the door handle(s). Do not move your foot
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door
will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all options
are enabled in the radio settings.
NOTE:
• To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks.
• The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
• With every movement of the Hands-Free sliding doors,
an audible tone will sound and the turn signals will
flash. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information on turning
these alerts on or off.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position and an audible
tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.
• If the power sliding doors encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off
through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information. The Hands-Free
Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during Jacking,
Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child Protection
Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle) to en-
gage the Child Protection Door Lock.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will not open the sliding door when the Child
Protection Door Lock is engaged.
• The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position.
• To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door Power
Off button, located in the overhead console. When the
overhead console power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door
may not be power opened or closed by pushing the
buttons just inside the sliding doors or pulling on the
handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protection
Door Locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will open the sliding door when the Child
Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the
lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever
downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever is
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Manual Recline Lever
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate two passen-
gers, while providing easy access to the third row seats
without any folding of the second row seats.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift the recline
lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion, and
push back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is removable
for added cargo space.
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats forward to allow
room for the bench seat removal.
Recline Lever
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the recline lever
located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the
seatback flat against the seat cushion.
3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat, in the
center near the floor to release the latches.
Folded Position
Release Strap Location
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire seat toward
the front of the vehicle. The seat can now be removed
through either sliding side door, or through the lift gate.
NOTE:
• Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recommended
that two people are utilized for its removal.
• When storing the removed bench seat, it is important to
keep the seatback in the folded position.
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats front attach-
ments into the detent positions on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original
position.
NOTE: Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to the
seating position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable
and removable for added cargo space.
The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the
floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release
the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be removed
from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from
the detent positions in the floor.
NOTE: Seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat
stowed in the load floor.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
Release Strap
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions
on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its
original position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the
seat cushion.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
• The seatback may lock into the fold flat position. Use the
recline lever to unlock the seatback.
• When returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original position.
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry
into the third row with or without a child seat installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
handle that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.
Fold Headrest To Upward Position
Easy Tilt Seat Handle
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull back
on the seatback and lock the seat into position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death my occur.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility for
passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by
pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the
seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the arm
rests are folded up.
Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed
Recliner Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will tilt
forward.
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded seat
and make sure that it locks into position. Then, pull the
seatback toward the back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap
located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of
the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on the strap
and push the seat forward for folding the seatback down
and tilting the seat to the floor.
NOTE: This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.
Pull Strap
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by
pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head
restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “1”
Strap “2”
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
Stowed Third Row Seat
Assist Straps
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
Stow ’n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the second
and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Auto Advance ‘n Return — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n Return
feature, the front seat will move forward automatically to a
location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement, without interference by the front seat. After the
second row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back to
the previous location once the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to both the
front driver and passenger power seats, if equipped.
Strap “2”
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not occu-
pied and the seat travel path is clear.
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located on
the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
door.
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
• The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is
not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in instrument cluster display.
• If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button.
The front seat cushion and seat back will move as
necessary to a location that will allow space for the
second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go” for further informa-
tion.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button a
second time. The front seat cushion and seat back will
return to the original starting location.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push the
Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the front power
seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button again will return the front
seat to the original starting location.
• The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat
will stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous
location. A message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster indicating that an obstacle has been detected.
• If the front seat is already in a location that will allow
space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front
seat will not move and a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
automatically re-calibrate when the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button is pushed. This may result in the seat
cushion moving forward and downward, before moving
to the location that will allow space for the second row
Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Second Row Stow ’n Go
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seat back all the way forward
using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of the
cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped.) Refer to ⬙Auto
Advance ‘n Return - If Equipped⬙ in this section for
instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the locked
position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position.
• For information on storage bin function with the seats
rearward refer to “Second Row Floor Storage Bins” in
“Internal Equipment” for further information.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats
while folding the top half down and rest it against the
front seats.
4. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by grabbing
the strap on the lower part of the seat back, and guide
the seat into the tub.
Push Panel Forward Pull Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
5. Push down on the seat back to lock the seat in the tub. 6. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards by
the bottom corner edge of the panel.
Push To Lock
Extend Floor Panel
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
8. Readjust the front seat as needed.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
• The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise
damage to the seat may occur.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor, move
the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped). Refer to ⬙Auto
Advance ‘n Return - If Equipped⬙ in this section for
instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the locked
position.
Push To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats
while folding the top half down and rest it against the
front seats.
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out of
the storage bin. Push the seat rearward making sure that
it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE: The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back
before folding into the upright position.
Push Panel Forward
Pull Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
5. To position the floor panel back into its original state,
grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.
6. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks
into position. Replace the floor mat as needed.
7. Readjust the front seat as needed.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
(Continued)
Extend Panel Push Down To Lock
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occu-
pied.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, and the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
(Continued)
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or de-
crease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
ously injured in an accident as a result.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next to
the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for
occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button,
the seat will move in the direction of the button push.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE: The third row outboard seat belts may interfere
with the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt
webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or opening
the seat. When the seat is in the desired position, remove
the webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use.
Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to
restrain an occupant.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
• The center head restraint raises and lowers manually but
will not lower automatically.
• The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back of the seat. Refer to
⬙Head Restraints - Third Row⬙ in ⬙Head Restraints⬙ for
further information.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and
the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or
together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the
following positions using the switch bank located on the
left rear trim panel:
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated) position,
push and release the “Normal” button. The seat will
automatically stop when the Normal position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push and
release the “Stow” button. The seat will automatically stop
when the Stow position is reached.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal 3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
2 — Stow 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or reverse
direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/Back” button.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
NOTE:
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third
row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button, place
the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow clips
located on the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches the
desired position, remove the webbing from the clip so it
is ready for use to restrain an occupant.
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button
again.
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
The Memory Buttons (1) and (2) on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, and radio station preset settings. Your key fobs can
also be programmed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to each of the memory positions.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Driver Memory Switch
1 — Memory Button 1
2 — Set Button
3 — Memory Button 2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through
the Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds,
followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to
5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is
attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push memory
button (1) on the driver’s door or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push memory
button (2) on the driver’s door or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat stops moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
cle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, the
driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward
if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7
inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when the ignition is
cycled out of the OFF position.
• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in the instru-
ment cluster display. For further information, refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
Heated Seats
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side
door handle trim panels.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with armrests on the front
seats. To adjust, push and hold the button while moving to
the desired position. Release the button once the desired
position is reached.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
are built into the seatbacks of the first and third row rear
seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged
goods.
Adjustable Armrest
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward. The front head restraints are also adjustable
forward and rearward. To adjust forward, pull the head
restraint toward the front of the vehicle to desired position.
To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull forward on the
head restraint to furthest forward position and head re-
straint will reset to furthest rearward position.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
Normal Position
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well as the
removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped) have adjustable
head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward.
NOTE: If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable. Do not pull on non-
adjustable head restraints when folding.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with adjustable
head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward.
Forward Adjustment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the
head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Release Strap
Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button
to power fold the
third row head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can be folded downward using the
Head Restraint button or using the manual release strap.
The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located left of
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time may vary depending on the temperature
of the environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING! (Continued)
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be adjusted
to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Manual Rearview Mirror
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automati-
cally adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Conversation Mirror
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and
push to latch it back in the stowed position.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Conversation Mirror
Power Mirror Controls
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can
be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Seats” for further
information.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this section for further
information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside
mirror will move slightly downward from the present
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver’s outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an associ-
ated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled
through the radio touchscreen. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Illuminated Mirror
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn
signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-pass func-
tions.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior
lights and the fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Turn Signals
2 — Flash-To-Pass
3 — Headlight Beams Low/High
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Ambient Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Fog Lamps Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent for head-
light, parking light and instrument panel operation.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned
OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated,
the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off
for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunc-
tion lever toward the instrument panel will switch from
low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral
position returns the headlights to the low beam operation.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights
to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Uconnect system. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” for further information.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at,
or above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from the
AUTO to the on position.
NOTE: Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will
stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF.
To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the O (off) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on
when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn the ignition OFF while
the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval
begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the head-
lights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition
switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not remain
on. To change the timer setting, select the proper setting
through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch
control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob in
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Fog Light Switch
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled
for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound and a message will display in the cluster to alert
the driver.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are left
on for extended periods of time when the ignition is in the
OFF position. After eight minutes of the ignition being in
the OFF position and the headlight switch in any position
other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automati-
cally until the next cycle of the ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition is placed in any position other than OFF during the
eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy
lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door
or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
remote keyless entry the lights will also turn on when the
unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push the
lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push
the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Reading Lights
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the right (instrument panel) dimmer control to the
off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the head-
light switch, and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instru-
ment panel dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel.
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom most
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off
(dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument lighting
go to their lowest dimmable setting.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the
first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed
wiper operation.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Washer And Wiper Controls
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select
the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay inter-
vals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever up-
ward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this fea-
ture.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multi-
function lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been cali-
brated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator
desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity
position 4. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity,
they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the
multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the
system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, when the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmis-
sion gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate one of two modes for the rear window wiper:
• First detent — intermittent mode.
• Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Manual Climate Controls
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Rear Climate Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are on.
Driver and Passenger Temperature UP and DOWN Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Icon Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear
passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Modes Control
Faceplate Knob
Modes Control
• Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution
mode.
• Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. The
airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone MTC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
appears. Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ button on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear tem-
perature and blower settings.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front MTC Panel Rear Control
Display
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
Icon Description
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front
Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button
on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen
to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
moves up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear
passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these out-
lets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located on
the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the
rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
• Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings
are displayed in control head.
• Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear tempera-
ture settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Controls
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated
in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Icon Description
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Uconnect 4 Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Automatic Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4C/4C With 8.4–inch Display NAV Automatic Climate Controls
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humid-
ity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button
on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode if not recommended.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.
Rear Climate Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are ON.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Driver And Passenger Temperature UP And DOWN Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator
is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear pas-
senger temperature settings. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
Icon Description
Modes Control
Modes Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
appears. Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ or “Done” button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
Icon Description
REAR AUTO Rear Auto Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function causes the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear tem-
perature and blower settings.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel Rear Control
Display
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front
Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the front occupants with the ability to control the rear temperature. Push the up arrow
button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s tem-
perature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear
passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear
passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this fea-
ture.
NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Icon Description
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through
the headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the rear
modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the
rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
•
Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are
displayed in control head.
•
Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the ve-
hicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated
in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air out-
lets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and deactivate
the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to
prevent fogging of the windows.
• If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on
the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually se-
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation For Automatic Temperature Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant selection. Use
of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
(Continued)
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Refer to an authorized dealer for filter replacement
instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Open-
ing a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim
panel which operates the passenger door window and a set
of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window control
fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window control again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
Front Passenger Power Door Controls
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the control up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the control down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
(Continued)
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING! (Continued)
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one second.
The sunroof will open automatically from any position and
stop at the full open position. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch rearward and the sunroof will
open to the full open position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement. The sunroof will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof
position.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close.” During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half-
open and full-open. When opening the sunshade from the
closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half-open position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue
to the full-open position.
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within
one second and the sunshade will open to the half-open
position and stop automatically. Push and release the
switch again from the half-open position and the sunshade
will open to the full-open position and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Open.” During Express open opera-
tion, any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the
shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward and the
shade will open to the half-open position and stop auto-
matically. Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward
again and the shade will open automatically to the full-
open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the shade will close automatically from any position. If
the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade com-
pletely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released
to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger
side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert
it into the seat located on the underside of the hood.
NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are not
in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmission must be
in PARK.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using Key Fob
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The key fob and the overhead console button will release
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle
will unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate.
NOTE: If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock
with a Passive Entry handle activation. If 1st Press of key
fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in Uconnect
Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with handle activa-
tion. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to
the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
• Hands-Free Liftgate (opens liftgate only) — If Equipped
Using the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, depressing the touch pad on
the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(if equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate
handle.
NOTE:
• To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot activa-
tion (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
• If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is pro-
grammed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock
with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If 1st Press of
key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with
hands-free activation.
• Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed with
liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on or off
in Uconnect Settings.
• Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to
the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the liftgate
door handle. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion.
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power
Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the
receiver. Use a straight kicking motion under either activa-
tion zone to open the Hands-Free Liftgate.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second. This assumes all options
are enabled in the radio.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the
liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information. The Hands-
Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during
Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
NOTE:
• The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically re-
verse to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manu-
ally.
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to remove
any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before
opening the liftgate.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. How-
ever, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8ft(1.2
x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated vacuum
system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only and should
only be used on dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces. It
is located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding door on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Area
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using your
vacuum, basic precautions should be followed, including
the following:
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in either ACC mode or engine running (ON)
unless you are using the vacuum system. Be aware a
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle when the vacuum system is in
use. ALWAYS push ignition button to place ignition
in the OFF mode when finished using the vacuum
system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:
• Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or
while driving.
• Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
• Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the
vehicle.
• Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as
gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form an explosive mix-
ture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or
flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition and
explode.
• Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
• Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
• Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
• Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with
any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair,
and anything that may reduce air flow.
• Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
• Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass,
nails, screws, coins, etc.
• Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
• Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service sta-
tions, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the
exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The
vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above
ground level in your vehicle.
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to 10 minutes
of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and push ignition button to place ignition in
Accessory (ACC) mode. The engine will not be running in
this mode. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children.
NOTE: The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power and then the vacuum will shut down. A low
battery indication light (LOW PWR) located below the
vacuum nozzle storage location will come on one minute
before the vacuum shuts down.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Running (ON) Operation - For more than 10
minutes of operation
• Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows.
• Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and leave engine running.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can cause
serious injury or death. Follow the precautions below
to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases.
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Always position vehicle outdoors and
fully open all side windows before using vacuum
system with the engine running.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly.
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend vacuum
hose from the storage location.
NOTE: The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle floor.
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
NOTE: To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open
the front Attachment Compartment.
• Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spaces includ-
ing the seat latches located in the floor.
• Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris from
carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up
pet hair.
Front Storage Compartments
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
• Hose Extension — Use to add another 12 ft (3.6 m) of
usable length to the vacuum hose. Hose extension is
located in the upper access panel behind the third row
seat on the driver’s side.
4. Push vacuum On/Off button
located under the
vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum as
needed.
NOTE:
• When the vacuum is ON, the LED indicator on the
On/Off button will illuminate.
• When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indicator will also
be off.
• After nine minutes of operation in ACC mode (engine
not running), the Low Power Indicator Light (LOW
PWR) will illuminate.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of fire,
serious injury or death:
• Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or
while driving.
• Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
• Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the
vehicle.
•
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as gasoline,
or use around explosive vapors. Vapors from flammable
liquids may form an explosive mixture with air and can
be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel
to a source of ignition and explode.
• Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
• Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
• Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
• Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with
any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair,
and anything that may reduce air flow.
• Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
• Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass,
nails, screws, coins, etc.
• Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
• Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks
that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING! (Continued)
near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service sta-
tions, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the
exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The
vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above
ground level in your vehicle.
5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum off
and store vacuum hose and any attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
• If vehicle is in ACC mode, push ignition button to
place ignition in the OFF mode, remove key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• If the engine is running, raise all of the windows, push
ignition button to place ignition in the OFF mode,
remove key fob from the vehicle, close all of the doors
and the liftgate and lock the vehicle.
Vacuum Troubleshooting
• DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an object
becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend the
hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor is
running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn the
vacuum OFF and remove the hose from the vehicle
following the removal instructions below. If the filter is
clogged, follow the emptying debris bin procedure and
lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove any
collected debris from the filter. Both the bin and the filter
can be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid mold and
stale odors, allow both to dry completely before rein-
stalling in your vehicle. If filter has tears, holes or other
damage and needs to be replaced, please contact your
authorized dealer.
• If there are any other issues with your vacuum, contact
your authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no user ser-
viceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the lower access panel
behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the lower access panel by pulling the finger grip
towards you and then pull downward.
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull the bin
towards you.
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash can.
Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove
loose debris from the filter. If the filter is clogged from
extended use, have the filter replaced by your autho-
rized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE: The debris bin must be fully installed and locked
for the vacuum to function properly.
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the upper access
panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
1. Unclip the hose from the hose access port located in the
rear of the vehicle by pushing the yellow vacuum hose
release lever with right thumb and lifting the hose with
index finger.
Debris Bin Release Knob
Vacuum System Access Panels
1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
2. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located be-
hind the sliding door.
3. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose out
through vacuum nozzle storage location.
4. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the hose.
Take care not to perforate the hose while attempting to
dislodge any objects.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the hose into
place.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the driver’s sunvisor,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-
Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Release Handle
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the
instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access
button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the
access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully
open position.
Front Door Storage
Drawer Access Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Drawer Released Drawer Fully Open
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some models.
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the
front door entry scuff moldings.
Front Seatback Storage
Umbrella Holder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
The area below the load floor, located in front of the second
row seats, is available for storage.
1. To access the storage bin with front seats in the rearward
position, place the lock rod in the unlocked position so
the load floor can fold upwards towards the seatback.
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position.
In Floor Storage Location
Lock Rod
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
(Continued)
Floor Latch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING! (Continued)
children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the
storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is
10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can
cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Sun Screens — If Equipped
Sun screens are available for second and third row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the
tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun
screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue
pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the
window.
Coat Hook
Sun Screen Retracted
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base
sill.
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can
be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets
can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery”
are connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Sun Screen Extended
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a power
outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of seats
to convert DC current to AC current. The Power Inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged in,
and the ignition is in RUN mode. It turns off when the
device is unplugged or the ignition is no longer in RUN
mode.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the Power Inverter, it resets. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electri-
cal devices prior to using the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Open Dots compat-
ible wire-free phone charging surface located below the
instrument panel near the front power outlet. The wireless
charger features continuous wireless charging during ve-
hicle operation and allows for uninterrupted Bluetooth
streaming to properly equipped vehicle audio systems.
Power Inverter
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 177
In order to enjoy the convenience of Open Dots wire-free
charging, you must obtain an aftermarket wireless-enabled
case and then install the case on your phone. Set the phone
on the wireless charging pad face up. The charging indi-
cator on your phone will light up indicating that your
phone is charging.
NOTE: The charging pad is safe to the touch. However, if
metallic items are placed on the charging surface while in
use, the device will turn off. Clean all spills immediately
and allow to dry before using.
For phones that already have built-in wireless charging
capability (Samsung, Apple iPhone 8, 8 Plus and X
Phones), a Qi Adapter is available to charge your phone
using the Open Dot wire-free phone charging surface.
Simply place the Qi Adapter (dot side down) on the
charging surface and then place your built-in charging
capable phone face up on top of the Qi Adapter. This
product may not be compatible with all vehicle/Open Dots
compatible wire-free phone charging surface combina-
tions.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks
the fob from being detected by the vehicle and pre-
vents the vehicle from starting.
To get your free aftermarket phone case or Qi Adapter, go
to http://invehiclewirelesscharging.com. You will need
your vehicle/voucher identification number (located in
your vehicle’s glove box). If you have any questions or are
not sure if you need a phone case or the Qi Adapter, please
call our customer support line for assistance: 877–360–7702
Wireless Charging Pad
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instrument
panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its
initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting
the system will need to be replaced.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To install
the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the
lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver into either of
the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to
remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 179
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the intention to open the
compartment.
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be
used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
Full Open Position
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
Thumb Screw
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 181
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws
completely.
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in
two different positions.
Stowing The Crossbars
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 183
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail. 5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 185
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side
rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
(Continued)
Stowed Crossbars
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 187
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................190
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............191
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........192
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................193
▫ Oil Life Reset .........................194
▫ KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped.....196
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......197
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped ............................202
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER .......................204
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........204
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................205
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................209
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................214
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................214
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................215
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................215
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .216
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................216
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................217
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” located in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge can indicate a higher temperature when
driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the gauge drops back
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
into the normal range and is no longer red. If the gauge
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance”.
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, which offers useful information to the driver. With the
ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key removed,
for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through and enter the main menus and sub-menus.
You can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an
instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster),
which offers useful information to the driver.
The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver to
select information by pushing the directional buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Back/Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display (base/premium cluster)
features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
center of the instrument cluster, and may include the
following menu/submenu items:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Oil Life Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display for approximately five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proce-
dure.
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/
RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
1. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
2. Push and release the down arrow button to access the
”Oil Life” menu screen.
3. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button to
access the “Vehicle Info” submenu.
4. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
5. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
• Continuous, dedicated telltale
• Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated
messages shown in the following table:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle
ignition ON
“KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
• “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
• “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Push and release the OK button to toggle between
MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX”
is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value
of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other
tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Safety” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Oil Life
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met in
order to reset Oil Life:
• The vehicle must be off
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will reset
the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a popup message will display
for 5 seconds, describing the required conditions, and then
the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
— If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will display the
following:
• Two sub menu pages that can be toggled between using
the left and right arrow buttons; one with Current Value
displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip infor-
mation will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
NOTE: The popup messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met. Mes-
sages remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Lower Left
• None
• Compass (Default)
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
2 — Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio
• Digital Speed
• Menu Title (Default)
3 — Lower Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
4 — Odometer (Premium Instrument Cluster)
• Show — Default
• Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
5 — Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
• None
• Compass (Default)
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
3 — Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range
• Average/Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Menu Title
• Menu Title (Default)
• Digital Speed
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
4 — Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And Mes-
sages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) dur-
ing certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push OK to enter the menu. Navigate between Trip
A or Trip B by using the right and left arrows.
For each trip the following information will be displayed:
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the OK button to reset the currently
displayed trip.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a door is ajar/
open and not fully closed. This indicator will reflect which
doors are open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
206 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
208 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic
Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when
the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
210 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.85 gal (7 L)
this warning light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warn-
ing.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Detected Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive
Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further infor-
mation.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive
Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target vehicle
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further infor-
mation.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a KeySense
key is detected upon startup of the vehicle. The indicator
will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the
KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use,
the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the
KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys⬙ in “Getting to Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
214 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been
turned on but not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This
occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the set
speed for the Speed Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) settings.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
216 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
218 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................220
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............220
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............221
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............229
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .229
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped ........................237
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........241
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........246
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........246
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............246
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................247
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........263
▫ Child Restraints .......................283
▫ Transporting Pets ......................311
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................311
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................311
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................312
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................312
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................315
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
220 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differen-
tial (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential
5
SAFETY 221
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
222 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
5
SAFETY 223
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
(Continued)
224 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” button and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” button and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter partial
mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
5
SAFETY 225
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
226 SAFETY
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5
SAFETY 227
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
228 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
Rear Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 229
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in false detections. The
BSM warning light may even remain illuminated the
entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of sec-
onds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
230 SAFETY
If the system detects degraded performance due to con-
tamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a
blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view
mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met.
First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the block-
age. After removing the blockage, the following procedure
can be used to reset the system:
• Cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further infor-
mation.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Warning Light Location
5
SAFETY 231
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
232 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
5
SAFETY 233
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
234 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if the host
vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the system
can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 235
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
• The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to
“KeySense Cluster Messages⬙ in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
236 SAFETY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti-
gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
5
SAFETY 237
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on,” this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
FCW Message
238 SAFETY
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible collision
NOTE:
• The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
• FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense func-
tion of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “KeySense
Cluster Messages⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are program-
mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This provides the
most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
5
SAFETY 239
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
240 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
NOTE: The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio
will display a TPMS message, when this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing and Mainte-
nance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
5
SAFETY 241
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to
turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
242 SAFETY
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and
the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display an ⬙Inflate
to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
5
SAFETY 243
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically up-
date, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning
Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value.
244 SAFETY
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
5
SAFETY 245
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be dis-
played as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
246 SAFETY
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
5
SAFETY 247
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
248 SAFETY
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 249
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
250 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 251
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
252 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the
Adjustable Anchorage
5
SAFETY 253
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third Row
Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row center
seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower
anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of
the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind
the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
254 SAFETY
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
Mini-Latch Plate Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 255
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
256 SAFETY
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
5
SAFETY 257
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
258 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5
SAFETY 259
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
260 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
5
SAFETY 261
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants.
If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a
child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to
shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat
normally. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle,
slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occu-
pants to latch the seatbelt securely.
Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold
the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third row
seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while
folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing
behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip
262 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly
on the occupant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
5
SAFETY 263
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
264 SAFETY
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
5
SAFETY 265
WARNING! (Continued)
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro-
priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
(Continued)
266 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
5
SAFETY 267
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo-
cated in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen-
ger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
268 SAFETY
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passen-
ger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
5
SAFETY 269
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
Seated Properly
270 SAFETY
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front pas-
senger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
5
SAFETY 271
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
272 SAFETY
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
Not Seated Properly
5
SAFETY 273
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo-
nents must function as designed. Do not make any modi-
fications to the front passenger seat components, assembly,
or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs
service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
274 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
5
SAFETY 275
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
276 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 277
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
278 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
5
SAFETY 279
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
280 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 281
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
282 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
5
SAFETY 283
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
284 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 285
WARNING! (Continued)
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
(Continued)
286 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
SAFETY 287
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
288 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Label
5
SAFETY 289
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
290 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 291
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
292 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and the center head restraint
in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the in-
stallation of the child restraint. 2nd
row Stow ’n Go head restraints are
not removable. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable in all ve-
hicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
5
SAFETY 293
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow n’ Go Seating
294 SAFETY
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown)
5
SAFETY 295
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located behind
all second row seating positions. The third row
has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard seating position.
All tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat,
near the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorage
Shown)
296 SAFETY
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 7 Passenger Stow n’
Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 8 Passenger
Anchorage Shown)
5
SAFETY 297
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchor-
ages C and D are used for the center seating position (2).
The left outboard position (3) does not have lower anchor-
ages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B
and C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
Center Seat LATCH Positions
298 SAFETY
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating posi-
tion (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖTo Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraintⴖ for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
5
SAFETY 299
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
300 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 301
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
302 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and the center head restraint
in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the in-
stallation of the child restraint. 2nd
row Stow ’n Go head restraints are
not removable. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable in all ve-
hicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
5
SAFETY 303
Frequently Asked Questions
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
304 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5
SAFETY 305
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants.
If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a
child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to
shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat
following the steps above. When the car seat is removed
from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch
to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the
child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. Instead,
switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in the
steps above or move the car seat to a different seating
position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
306 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
5
SAFETY 307
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger
308 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
(Continued)
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7
Passenger Stow n’ Go Anchorage Shown)
5
SAFETY 309
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in
the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the
center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to
the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage for
either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard
(left) side of the head restraint support posts, as shown
in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
310 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child
restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the
third row. This anchorage is intended for one child
restraint at a time.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
5
SAFETY 311
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
312 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 313
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
314 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
5
SAFETY 315
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................321
▫ Normal Starting .......................321
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................326
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .....326
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................326
▫ To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ....................326
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .327
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .328
䡵 PARK BRAKE ..........................328
▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) .................328
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............333
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................334
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .334
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .........335
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................336
䡵 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ............341
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................341
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........342
▫ Auto Stop/Start ........................342
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ............................343
▫ To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start. . .344
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . .344
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .345
▫ System Malfunction .....................345
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........346
▫ To Activate ...........................346
6
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................347
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................347
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................348
▫ To Resume Speed ......................348
▫ To Deactivate .........................348
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................348
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....350
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....351
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................351
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed...............352
▫ To Cancel ............................352
▫ ToTurnOff...........................353
▫ To Resume ...........................353
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................353
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......355
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................358
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................358
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........359
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........360
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........362
▫ General Information .....................365
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .365
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ............................368
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................370
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert ...................370
▫ ParkSense Display ......................370
▫ Enabling
And Disabling ParkSense ..........375
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .375
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............376
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........376
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................378
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................379
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert ...................380
▫ ParkSense Display ......................380
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........389
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....389
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............390
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........390
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................392
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System ......................393
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................394
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................403
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............412
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................412
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............413
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............414
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................416
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........416
䡵 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................419
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................422
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................424
▫ Certification Label ......................424
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................426
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............426
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................428
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................429
▫ V
ehicle Loading Chart ...................430
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............432
▫ Towing Requirements ...................432
▫ Towing Tips ..........................436
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................437
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .437
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models ..........438
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................438
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............438
▫ Driving Through Water ..................439
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition positions without starting the ve-
hicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced
if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is
detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message
will display in the instrument cluster. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the Instrument Cluster
Display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to
turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the
vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehi-
cle’s transmission to the PARK position. The rotary
shifter will automatically reset itself to the PARK posi-
tion. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF
position (Engine OFF). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark
Engaged”
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions are
met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the
vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The Electric
Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in
some conditions. Please reference SAFE HOLD pages for
additional information regarding this function.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged”will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
• AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or Brake Pedal is not
depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged”will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may Park.
Park will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will display in the Instrument Cluster Display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h). The gear position
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) when
the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will de-
fault to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) and the above condition are met,
enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the passen-
ger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater
cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap and properly stow away behind
the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized Mopar dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more conve-
nient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle
from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the integrated center
stack.
To apply the park brake manually, push the switch mo-
mentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once the
park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in
the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can only
be released when the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engag-
ing.
The park brake will release automatically when the igni-
tion is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled
and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle away by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Electric Park Brake Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal.
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The park
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not
in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, push
on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement
is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and
a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will
also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle re-
mains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the park brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake will
remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flash-
ing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to hold
the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the “Customer Programmable Features” section of
the “Uconnect Settings”.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is
not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is
open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park
brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open
and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake ser-
vice.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the “Brake Service” through the “Uconnect
Settings” in your vehicle. This menu based system will
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position
manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate
the gear selector. Push down on the gear selector and then
rotate it, to access the L position. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at low speeds). To
shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Transmission Gear Selector
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the park brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn-
ing message will appear in the instrument cluster, and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). Normal opera-
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift
for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clock-
wise.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it
may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly
when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
converter clutch will function normally once the pow-
ertrain is sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
System. This system is designed to address exhaust and
engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator,
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle
and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• The power steering system is fully electric; it requires no
power steering fluid.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or
shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the
engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
Auto Stop/Start
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and ensure
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation
of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument
cluster display Stop/Start screen. In the following situa-
tions the engine will not stop:
• If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start Off
button.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low. During this time a message will
display ⬙Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging⬙.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-
TOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Auto Stop/Start:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a mes-
sage will display ⬙Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charg-
ing⬙.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
instrument panel). The light on the switch will illumi-
nate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
Stop/Start Button
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
Automatic Shutdown
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in READY mode (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour after
the driver exits, this feature will automatically turn the
vehicle off. Notifications have been added into this feature
to raise awareness of the timed event:
• In the interior of the vehicle, the instrument cluster will
display “Ready To Drive”, and will be accompanied by
three audible chimes while exiting. These interior warn-
ings will occur regardless of whether the key fob re-
mains in the vehicle or is removed.
• For the exterior of the vehicle, the horn will sound three
times if the fob is removed from the vehicle and the
vehicle is in the “READY” mode.
Please consider this feature when intentionally running the
vehicle for extended periods of time over one hour. To
restart the vehicle, follow the normal vehicle starting
process.
NOTE: If the vehicle is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
system will automatically time out (shut down) after an
initial 30 minutes of inactivity, followed by the additional
amount of time for power accessory delay selected in the
radio settings menu. Once the vehicle times out, it will
switch to the OFF position.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
After turning off the STOP/START system, push the
STOP/START OFF switch again (located on the instrument
panel). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display and the Stop/Start telltale will remain
yellow. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — SET (+)/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within 3
minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the instrument cluster display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open at low speed.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after the
ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue
to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC to the existing set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
powertrain braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing set speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, and the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC. The vehicle will
accelerate to the existing set speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be cancelled.
Brake Alert
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system
settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
show “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Do-
ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruc-
tion, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the
sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will
have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to main-
tain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant on
the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on
the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be auto-
matically applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of
the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status, and remain on until the vehicle is moved out
of REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
Rear Sensor Locations
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system off via
the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show
⬙KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙
message.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message for five seconds while the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not oper-
ate and “PARKSENSE OFF” message will be displayed.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the sys-
tem detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of
the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in
Rear Sensor Locations
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the second
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the first flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system off via
the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show
⬙KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙
message.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with a ⬙WIPE
OFF⬙ or “SERVICE” overlay, depending on the location and
fault type. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER-
VICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will
remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
rized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five seconds
while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This may cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, provid-
ing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steer-
ing wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. De-
pending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-
vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic
vehicle calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
tions are present:
• The gear position is in DRIVE.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• The driver’s door is closed.
• The liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will appear in the instrument clus-
ter display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
•
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satis-
fied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will show in the instrument cluster
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to a perpen-
dicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking
if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for
Parallel Park” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
(Continued)
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING! (Continued)
and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
ward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It uses
a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and
measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
Lane Sense On Message
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
Telltale
is solid white only when the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
visual warning in the instrument cluster display will
show the left inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off),
while the outside lane line on the left of the display will
remain solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid
Yellow Outside Line/Flashing) With Yellow Telltale
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left inside and outside lane lines turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) while the left
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow
Outside Line) With Solid Yellow Telltale
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
outside line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid
Yellow Outside Line) With Flashing Yellow Telltale
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
ParkView Camera Location
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle when-
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different
view is selected through the ⬙on screen soft buttons⬙. The
top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is
comprised of four sequential cameras located in the front
grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE: The Surround View Camera System has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera
view and top view is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position. There is a touch screen button (X) to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited
and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side
view mirrors and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
Modes Of Operation
“Manual” activation of the Surround View camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera soft key
located in the “Controls” screen within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with Rear
View and Front View in a split view display. There is
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear
of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object.
ParkSense Arcs
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.
• Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top view of the vehicle with optional
active guide lines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top view
will be disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front view will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top view of
the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is se-
lected.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following conditions:
• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
• The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different gear.
• If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE, press
the “X” button.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
• The camera delay system is turned off manually through
the Uconnect settings menu. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see your
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in
your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe
seal the system.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
(Continued)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (3 o’clock
position) and release to open.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle
opens and holds both flapper doors while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after nozzle
clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge (3
o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then release.
The fuel filler door will latch closed.
Fuel Filler Cap Latch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice
build up.
• Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid
spills.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR (Gross
Combined
Weight Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Weight)
Max. Tongue
Weight
3.6L/Automatic Yes 8,600 lbs
(3,900 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
3,600 lbs
(1,632 kg)
360 lbs
(163 kg)
No 6,500 lbs
(2,948 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
149 lbs
(67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Vehicle Loading Chart
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the vehicle
can carry.
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
• Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle full
fluids NO Occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
• For calculation purposes, average weight of an occu-
pant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
• GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
• CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg)
• Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lbs (2723 kg) -
4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
• 1505 lbs (682 kg) – 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x 150 lbs [68 kg])
– 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs
(247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load,
Max Trailer
Max Cargo With
Max Trailer
360 lb (136 kg)
Tongue Load
2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg
1205 lbs (546 kg)
1205 lbs (546 kg)
– 360 lbs
(136 kg) =
845 lbs (383 kg)
845 lbs (383 kg)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load,
Max Trailer
Max Cargo With
Max Trailer
360 lb (136 kg)
Tongue Load
4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
– 360 lbs
(136 kg) =
545 lbs (247 kg)
545 lbs (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
– 360 lbs
(163 kg) = 95 lbs
(43 kg)
95 lbs (43 kg)
• Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or
rear axles.
• GAWR is found on sticker in Driver’s Side Door Jam.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Weight Distribution
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. For increased engine braking on steep down-
hill grades, select the LOW range.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
• To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement,
you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on
the ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Recreational Towing — All Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all
four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the park brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the park brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............443
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .443
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................449
▫ Replacement Bulbs ......................449
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................451
䡵 FUSES ................................456
▫ General Information .....................456
▫ Fuse Location .........................457
▫ Underhood Fuses .......................457
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ............................466
▫ Jack And Spare Tire Location ..............466
▫ Equipment Removal ....................467
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................467
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................468
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................474
▫ Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped.......476
▫ Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If
Equipped ............................479
▫ Return Inflatable Spare Tire................484
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........484
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................495
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............496
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................497
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ..............499
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............499
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
Assist And SOS Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 443
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected
to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
444 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be
able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 445
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
446 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features and
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 447
WARNING! (Continued)
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
448 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp Low Beam - D3S
High Beam - 9005LL
Halogen Headlamp Reflector Low Beam - H11LL
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
All High Beams - 9005LL
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 449
Lamps Bulb Number
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped)
PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped)
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb Equipped);
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped);
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
450 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If
Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source your-
self. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Halogen Headlamps
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 451
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb
452 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then remove the front turn signal
lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp socket
clockwise to lock it in place.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 453
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully
peel back liner for access.
2. Reach through the front fascia to fog lamp housing to
access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counterclockwise, and
remove the bulb from the front fog lamp housing.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
Front Fog Lamp Socket
454 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the front fog lamp bulb into the front fog lamp
housing, and rotate the bulb clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install
fasteners.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail
Lamps (If Bulb Equipped)
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off the
bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim.
3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now
visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove two torx head screws on bodyside lamp using
a T30 screwdriver.
3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb socket
on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counter-clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 455
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
456 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into a controller located in the
engine compartment.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on
the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at
each side of the PDC cover, avoid the usage of screw
drivers or any other tool to remove the cover, since they
may apply excessive force and result in a broken/damaged
part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/ANC
Power Distribution Center
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 457
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power
Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats
Solenoid LT
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat
Solenoid RT
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
458 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F25A – 10 Amp Red Handsfree LT & RT RR
Door Release Mod
F25B – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR
Mirror
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video
USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting #2)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 459
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior
Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door
Module-LT
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
460 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F55A – 15 Amp Blue Radio Frequency HUB/
Keyless Ignition System
(KIN) / (Electronic Steering
Lock-BUX ONLY)
F55B – 15 Amp Blue DVD / Video Routing
Module (VRM
F56A – 10 Amp Red Front and Rear HVAC Con-
trol Module / Occupant
Classification Module
(OCM)/Electronic Steering
Lock (ESL)
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – – Not Used
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If
Equipped
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
F62 – – Not Used
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 461
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn
— If Equipped
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
F67 – 10 Amp Red Haptic Lane Feedback
Module (HALF) / Park-
tronics System (PTS)/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR
ISC
462 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/
Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red RR Entertainment Screen 1
& 2/Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd
Row USB Charge Only/
2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vaccum Cleaner SW/
3rd Row Recline ST SW/LT
& RT Stow N Go SW/LT &
RT Sliding Door SW Back-
light
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof
/CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Mod-
ule (TCM)/ E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS/Front And Rear
HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 463
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F83 20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights — If
Equipped
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump
— If Equipped
F84 – – Not Used
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue Front Ventilated Seats/
Heated Steering Wheel
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC
RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red Selectable Fuse Location
464 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module - If
Equipped
F100A – 10 Amp Red AHLM
F100B – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/
CVPM/Humidity
Sensor/In Vehicle Tempera-
ture Sensor
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp FRT PWR Window W/O
Door Nodes + RR PWR
Window Lockout
* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit Breaker.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 465
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack And Spare Tire Location
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor (if
equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped) are stowed
behind an access panel on the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
466 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Equipment Removal
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service Kit
if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding the
Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the
storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw counterclockwise
to collapse from storage area that is located behind the
tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 467
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
468 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance⬙ for
information about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and
operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
Extending The Wrench
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 469
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of
the vehicle body.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
Jack Locations
Front Jack Location
470 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jack Engaged Rear Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 471
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right
until the jack head is properly engaged in the described
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in the
rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Rear Jack Engaged
472 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be dam-
aged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the
vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the
nuts with wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is
lowered you will have a second opportunity to “torque”
the lug nuts.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
using the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service Kit if
equipped. Refer to “Portable Air Compressor” in this
section for usage procedure if equipped. Refer to “Tire
Service Kit For Inflating Tire” in this section for usage
procedure if equipped.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has reached
its pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed
from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper
wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 473
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location. Have
the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as
possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and
place the access panel back. The stud of the storage
area must be threaded through the lower part of the
jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it in
place.
NOTE: Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
474 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug
nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is
no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the
vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated
wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause
vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for proper wheel
lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 475
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug
nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is
no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the
vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated
wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause
vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in the “Technical Specifications” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air Com-
pressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in the
side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable
tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
476 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage
location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the Jacking Instructions
within this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as described in the Jack
Instructions section in this manual.
Make sure that the valve stem is
located near the ground, and then
screw the air hose of the Portable Air
Compressor to the valve stem.
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 477
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it the vehicles 12
Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before turning ON the Portable
Air Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) recommended as per
the label on the wheel or if the vehicle
equipped with the inflatable spare
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading information label lo-
cated on the driver-side door open-
ing.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower
the vehicle with the jack as described
in the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
478 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the Portable
Air Compressor and place it on the
center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
• Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in the
provided place.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. Use
the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment of the
cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 479
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air mode operation
only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
480 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
WARNING!
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 481
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location.
2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Remove the cap from the
valve stem and then screw the fitting
in at the end of the Sealant/Air Hose
clockwise onto the valve stem.
3. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
4. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
482 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine ON.
6. Always start the engine before turn-
ing ON the Tire Service Kit.
7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air Mode position.
NOTE: Do not fill inflatable spare tire
with sealant. Refer to “Tire Service Kit”
in this chapter for repairing tires.
8. Switch the power button ON.
9.
Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) recommended as per the
label on the wheel or if the vehicle
equipped with the inflatable spare tire
pressure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located on
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
10. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure,
lower the vehicle with the jack as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 483
11. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the Tire
Service Kit and place it on the center
of the steering wheel.
12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and secure
it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area.
Return Inflatable Spare Tire
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit or Portable
Air Compressor and push the deflation button to do this
step. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” or “Portable Air Com-
pressor” if equipped in this section for additional infor-
mation. The inflatable spare tire will return to its origi-
nal shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor if
equipped and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
484 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored in
the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 485
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
486 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs
to be replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equipment
vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires’ side walls.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode
when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into
them.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 487
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
488 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire Service
Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode
position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and
into the tire.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 489
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make
sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pres-
sure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the
tire pressure by looking at the Pres-
sure Gauge.
490 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the
Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Service Kit
and place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10
minutes to ensure distribution of the
Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at your authorized dealer.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 491
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the
hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode
position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
492 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated,
push the Deflation Button to reduce the
tire pressure to the recommended infla-
tion pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel
after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 493
3. Remove the bottle cover. 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Remove The Bottle Cover Rotate The Bottle Up
494 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse
order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter-
nator or electrical system may occur.
Remove The Bottle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 495
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the
engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
Positive Jump Starting Location
Negative Jump Starting Location
496 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 497
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative post near the windshield cowl
(exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
498 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with the
spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed,
insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the
vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to
“Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” in
this manual.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
(Continued)
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 499
WARNING! (Continued)
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of
the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
If possible, you should apply the parking brake. Acti-
vating the Manual Park Release will allow your ve-
hicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
500 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park Re-
lease:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in
the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the lower
left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to a
red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will
go, then release it. The transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
NOTE: When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the
access cover cannot be re-installed.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in
the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and re-install
the access cover. If the access cover cannot be re-
installed, repeat steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 501
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
502 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on
the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is en-
gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 503
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that
can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the
underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
504 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of
the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the ignition
is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is
released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Elec-
tric Park Brake each time the driver’s door is opened, by
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in
order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 505
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
506 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................509
▫ Maintenance Plan ......................510
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ............512
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................513
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................513
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................514
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................514
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................515
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................516
▫ Engine Oil ...........................516
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................518
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................518
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............519
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............520
▫ Body Lubrication ......................523
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................524
▫ Exhaust System ........................529
▫ Cooling System ........................530
▫ Brake System .........................535
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................536
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................538
䡵 TIRES ................................538
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................538
▫ Tires — General Information ..............548
▫ Tire Types ............................554
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................555
▫ Wheel
And Wheel Trim Care ..............558
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............559
8
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............560
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................561
▫ Treadwear ............................561
▫ Traction Grades ........................561
▫ Temperature Grades .....................562
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................562
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................563
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........563
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........564
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................564
䡵 INTERIORS ............................565
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................565
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................566
▫ Leather Parts ..........................566
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................567
508 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 509
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the required maintenance intervals on the follow-
ing page.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
510 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pul-
ley, and replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 511
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
512 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner 8 — Windshield Washer Fill
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 513
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart or one liter of oil when the
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on
these engines.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
• Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
514 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 515
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
516 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 517
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
518 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 519
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved re-
frigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
520 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equip-
ment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (Cabin Air
Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension tether.
Detach the glove compartment tension tether by sliding
the black tension tether clip down, and popping it out of
the slot on the side of the glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either side
of the glove compartment door. To release them, push
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 521
inward on each travel stop, and pull the glove compart-
ment door down until the travel stops pass clear of their
hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible to
gain access to the cabin air filter compartment cover.
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment snap,
and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a small
space on the side of each snap to use for separating the
lid from the snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the
snap completely from the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment cover
to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tab
522 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
pulling out the filter cover to expose the cabin air filter.
Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of the
housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into
their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap lids
until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near closed
position to reengage the glove compartment travel
stops. Finally, pull the glove compartment tension
tether clip down and slide it back into the slot on the
side of the glove compartment door.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 523
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
524 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1—WiperBlade
2 — Release Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3—WiperArm
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 525
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-
shield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1—WiperBlade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
526 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 527
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
3—WiperBlade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
528 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 529
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
530 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 531
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
532 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 533
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
534 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 535
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
(Continued)
536 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 537
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
538 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 539
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
540 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 541
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
542 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 543
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
544 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 545
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
546 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 547
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
548 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 549
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
550 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the
tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 551
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
552 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 553
WARNING! (Continued)
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
554 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 555
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
556 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 557
WARNING! (Continued)
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
558 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued)
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 559
CAUTION! (Continued)
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
560 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
(Continued)
Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 561
WARNING! (Continued)
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protec-
tive waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
562 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
• Do not drain the vehicle’s cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately five
minutes, with the air conditioning system on and high
fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the
compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the drivers door is closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 563
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
564 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 565
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
566 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 567
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................570
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............570
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................570
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .571
▫ Torque Specifications ....................571
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................572
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................572
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................573
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................573
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............574
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .574
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......574
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................575
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................575
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............576
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................576
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................577
▫ Engine ..............................577
▫ Chassis .............................579
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped under the right rear sliding door trim
panel and printed on the Automobile Information Disclo-
sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number
570 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 571
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Torque Patterns
572 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 573
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
574 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 575
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API
Certified)
5 quarts 4.7 liters
576 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
U.S. Metric
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula)
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 577
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
578 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amounts:
Single A/C System — 1.94 lb (880g)
Dual A/C System — 2.31 lb (1050g)
Compressor Oil Use only PAG oil PSD-1:
Single A/C System — 140 ml
Dual A/C System — 190 ml
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 579
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................584
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...............584
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................585
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................586
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings .............................587
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings ....................613
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......639
▫ Radio Operation........................639
▫ Media Mode ..........................639
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................640
䡵 UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......641
▫ Uconnect Theater Overview ...............641
▫ Getting Started ........................642
▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect
System ..............................642
▫ Uconnect Theater Controls ................643
▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater
Rear Screens ..........................644
▫ Pairing The Remote .....................645
▫ Unpairing The Remote ...................646
▫ Media Sources .........................647
▫ Uconnect Theater Remote Control ...........648
▫ Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls . . .649
▫ General Information .....................651
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect System .......................651
▫ Disc Menu............................654
▫ Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions .....654
10
▫ Uconnect Theater Apps...................655
▫ Using The Rear Video USB Port.............657
▫ Play Video Games ......................658
▫ Headphones Operation ...................658
▫ Display Settings ........................661
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . . .661
▫ Rear Climate Controls....................662
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped ...............664
▫ Wireless Streaming — If Equipped...........664
▫ BD And DVD Region Codes ...............667
▫ Product Agreement .....................669
▫ General Information .....................672
▫ FCC/IC Regulatory Notices ...............672
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .673
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........673
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................675
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................675
▫ Get Started ...........................676
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................677
▫ Radio ...............................677
▫ Media ...............................678
▫ Phone ...............................679
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................680
▫ Climate ..............................682
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) ....................683
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped ............................684
▫ Register
(4C/4C NAV) ...................684
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....685
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................685
582 MULTIMEDIA
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............686
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............686
▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...................687
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............688
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............690
▫ General Information .....................691
▫ Additional Information ...................692
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............692
10
MULTIMEDIA 583
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4 Drag & Drop Menu Bar
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Drag & Drop Menu Bar
584 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
10
MULTIMEDIA 585
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and/or buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many fea-
tures can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob
one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON,
OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the face-
plate a second time to turn the screen on.
586 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings
Press the ”Apps” button then press the “Settings
”
button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu
screen and press the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen to move up or down through the
available settings. Settings gives you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle options, feature settings may
vary.
To change features, select the desired feature. This will
bring you to the available options for the feature. Change
feature settings as desired by pressing and releasing the
preferred setting option until a check-mark appears next to
the setting. Once the desired selection is made, either press
the back arrow or the “X” button on the touchscreen to
close the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down arrow
buttons on the touchscreen allows you to toggle through
the available settings. The list of programmable features
include:
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “ON/RUN” position.
KeySense
This feature allows you to control specific settings when
the KeySense key is in use. The vehicle’s KeySense settings
are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle
Uconnect 4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On
The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 587
owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the
first time. This 4-digit PIN can only be reset by an autho-
rized dealer.
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will
be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Dis-
play.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located be-
hind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
588 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, it will alert, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects are in your
blind spot. The “Blind Spot Alert” feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights &
Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is
located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Maximum Vehicle Speed +-
NOTE:
The “Maximum Vehicle Speed” feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105, 110 km/h).
10
MULTIMEDIA 589
Setting Name Selectable Options
Start Up Fuel Level
Message
On Off
Early Low Fuel Alert On Off
SiriusXM Setup Channel Skip Subscription Information
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, and select the channels you would like to skip.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
590 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 591
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
1-10 1-10
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions. The setting can be changed from 1-10.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
1-10 1-10
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme List of Themes
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
592 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in
Cluster
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 593
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
594 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
On Off
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the
touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hr 24 hr
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
10
MULTIMEDIA 595
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera Delay — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view
image with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the
Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the
touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
596 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera
Guide Lines
On Off
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
10
MULTIMEDIA 597
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
On Off
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Keysense On Off
598 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Brakes
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park
brakes to all break system service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 599
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 60 sec
30 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Ap-
proach
0 sec 60 sec
30 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams— If
Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
600 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Flash Lights With Sliding Door On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automati-
cally when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 601
Setting Name Selectable Options
Start — If Equipped
1st Press of Key Fob Un-
locks — If Equipped
Driver All
NOTE:
When the “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks” feature’s “Driver” option is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on
the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Power Liftgate Alert On Off
NOTE:
When the “Power Liftgate Alert” feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Sliding Door Alert On Off
NOTE:
The “Sliding Door Alert” feature only occurs when the hands free feature is used, and not for other methods of open-
ing the sliding door.”
Flashing Lights with Slid-
ing Door — If Equipped
On Off
602 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hands Free Power Lift
Gate
On Off
Hands Free Power Sliding
Door
On Off
Personal Settings Linked
to Key Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory loca-
tion (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to “On,” when the key fob is used to unlock the
door.
Remote Door Unlock/Door
Unlock — If Equipped
Driver All
NOTE:
When the “Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock” feature’s “Driver” option is selected, only the driver’s door will un-
lock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
“Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle
more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
10
MULTIMEDIA 603
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort ” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
604 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 605
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting, as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Ar-
row Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Ar-
row Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
606 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is
connected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 607
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the com-
pass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass Variance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
Compass
Calibration
Yes
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
608 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 609
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming
call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the
road.
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager List Of Connected Phones
NOTE:
Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives you the
option to determine which phone will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay or Android Auto).
610 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
10
MULTIMEDIA 611
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings to Default” feature is selected it resets all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth de-
vices and presets.
612 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
four digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when
accessing the specific settings for the first time. This four
digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 613
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will
be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Automatic Emergency
Braking — If Equipped
List Of Settings
When “Automatic Emergency Braking” is selected, the following options will appear:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped: Select “Only Warning” or “Warning + Active Braking”
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure
when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only”
option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more
brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your
vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
614 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
• Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped: Select “Near,” “Med” or “Far”
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in
front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in
front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located be-
hind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 615
Setting Name Selectable Options
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, it will alert, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects are in your
blind spot. The “Blind Spot Alert” feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights &
Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is
located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Maximum Vehicle Speed +-
NOTE:
The “Maximum Vehicle Speed” feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105, 110 km/h).
SiriusXM Setup Channel Skip Subscription Information
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
616 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language List of Languages
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 617
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
618 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in
Cluster
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 619
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
620 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle’s exterior environment
while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view
image with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position.
10
MULTIMEDIA 621
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera Guidelines
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the
Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the
touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
622 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
10
MULTIMEDIA 623
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Automatic Emergency
Braking — If Equipped
List Of Settings
When “Automatic Emergency Braking” is selected, the following options will appear:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped: Select “Only Warning” or “Warning + Active Braking”
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is
selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pres-
sure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case
of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
624 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
• Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped: Select “Near,” “Med” or “Far”
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front
of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you,
based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the
least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Dis-
play.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Sliding Door Alert — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is
sensed.
10
MULTIMEDIA 625
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
626 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Brakes
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park
brakes to all break system service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 627
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the vehicle is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams— If
Equipped
On Off
628 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Flash Lights With Sliding Door On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automati-
cally when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
10
MULTIMEDIA 629
Setting Name Selectable Options
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If
Equipped
Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start
— If Equipped
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When the “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks” feature’s “Driver” option is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on
the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Power Liftgate Alert On Off
NOTE:
When the “Power Liftgate Alert” feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
630 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sliding Door Alert On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is
sensed.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door On Off
Hands Free Power Lift Gate On Off
Hands Free Sliding Door On Off
Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory loca-
tion (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to “On,” when the key fob is used to unlock the
door.
10
MULTIMEDIA 631
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tem-
peratures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
632 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 633
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting, as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
634 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List Of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further informa-
tion, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 635
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Infor-
mation screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
636 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Accessibility On Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray
and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the
system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore App Drawer to Default
Order
OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
10
MULTIMEDIA 637
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
638 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions. Both controls are rocker-type switches with a
push-button in the center.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
Media etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 639
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
The data USB ports are located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this vehicle.
• In the center console
• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater Rear Data USB Port
Center Console USB Charging Port
640 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See an authorized dealer
for details.
NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Theater Overview
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family
years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect
Theater system;
• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
• Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB
port
• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
• Project your mobile phone, or tablet screen onto the rear
Uconnect Theater touchscreens — If Equipped
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
3rd Row USB Charging Port
10
MULTIMEDIA 641
Getting Started
There are three different ways to operate the features of the
Uconnect Theater:
• The Remote Control
• The Uconnect System
• The Individual Uconnect Theater Touchscreens
Accessing The System From The Uconnect System
You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the
radio touchscreen following the steps below:
Option 1
1. Press the “Media” button.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button icon.
Uconnect Theater Screen
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen (Rear Touchscreens)
2 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (Headphone Jack, HDMI Input,
USB Charge Only Port)
Uconnect Theater Button
642 MULTIMEDIA
Option 2
1. Press the “Apps” button on the bottom of the touch-
screen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touchscreen.
You may need to navigate to different pages in the Apps
drawer to find the Uconnect Theater button.
NOTE: The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down from the Apps drawer to the drag & drop
menu to create an App/shortcut. Refer to “Drag & Drop
Menu Bar” in this section for more information.
Uconnect Theater Controls
Uconnect Theater Summary Screen
1 — Power All On/Off (Con-
trols Both Screens)
2 — Mute All On/Off (Controls
Both Screens)
3 — Lock All On/Off (Controls
Both Screens)
4 — Source Drop Down List for
Current Screen
5 — Lock On/Off for Current
Screen
6 — Mute On/Off for Current
Screen
7 — Power On/Off for Current
Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 643
Parents can control certain features of the system with the
“Uconnect Theater Controls” screens, right from the
Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options include:
• Change media sources or select APPS by using the drop
down list
• Lock one or both screens
• Mute an individual screen or both screens
• Turn on/off one or both screens
• View media showing on a specific screen while gear
selector is in PARK
• Listen in to a particular Uconnect Theater screen
through the vehicle’s sound system by selecting the
“Listen In” feature after selecting the “Press to Enter”
option.
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from the
rear screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will automatically power
on.
NOTE: A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to
the system.
Individual Main Screen Listen In Feature
644 MULTIMEDIA
2. If “YES” is selected to Pair a Remote, push any button
on the remote and pairing will immediately start.
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen
will pop up.
NOTE:
• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful.
• Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by
dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do
not see the on screen arrow, try using the “Screen”
button on the remote to switch between rear screen one
and rear screen two to make sure the remote is control-
ling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for
the remote to react when initially paired.
• If remote does not pair, refer to “Pairing The Remote”
section for an alternative pairing process.
Pairing The Remote
If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater
system, follow the procedure below:
1. Install batteries into both remotes.
2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
Remote Pairing
10
MULTIMEDIA 645
3. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings
menu.
4. Press the “Pair Remote” option. Press the “OK” button.
A touchscreen notification will appear indicating that
your remote has been paired successfully or unsuccess-
fully.
5. Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by
dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do
not see the on screen arrow, try using the “Screen”
button on the remote to switch between rear screen one
and rear screen two to make sure the remote is control-
ling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for
the remote to react when initially paired.
NOTE:
• If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by pushing and
holding the Play/Pause, Down arrow, and the Screen
button simultaneously for about five seconds until the
back light flashes.
• If the remote is ever non-operational, try re-pairing the
remote.
• The system can accommodate up to ten paired remote
controls.
Unpairing The Remote
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater software,
or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote will need
to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater system. To
unpair the remote:
1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
2. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings
menu.
3. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote
section of ⬙Settings” and follow the on screen instruc-
tions to complete the unpairing process.
4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.
NOTE: There will be a touchscreen notification message
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to
unpair a second remote.
646 MULTIMEDIA
Media Sources
Users can select content for each screen from the front radio
touchscreen by choosing desired content from the “Select
Input” drop down menu. Options include Blu-Ray Disc,
HDMI, USB, Apps, and Viewing the other rear screen.
NOTE: Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other with a single press of a button.
Doing this however will disable and gray out certain
player controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s
content.
Media Source Selection
1 – Selected Source Screen 1
2 – Screen 2 Source Selection Drop Down
10
MULTIMEDIA 647
Uconnect Theater Remote Control
1. Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by running
your finger over this area and tapping to select items on
the touchscreen, functions similar to a computer/laptop
mouse.
2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access available “Sources”.
4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow
buttons
to highlight an item or scroll through menus.
5. Fast Forward Button
— Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
6. Play/Pause Button
㥋 — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
7. Fast Rewind Button
— Push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to
toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2
(Passenger Side).
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to
previous screen.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or 2) is
being controlled by the remote control.
Remote Control
648 MULTIMEDIA
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for opera-
tion.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them accord-
ing to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery
compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls
Uconnect Theater Home Screen (Rear Touchscreens)
1 — Search Button (Front USB
Media Search)
2 — Power Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — Toggle Button List And
Icon View
5 — Source Card Page Indicator
6 — Wired Headphone Volume
7—
Rear Climate Control Button
8 — Home Button
9 — Source Cards
10
MULTIMEDIA 649
You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or
Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen
in one step by choosing the “View Screen” source card.
NOTE:
• Source card order can be changed by pressing the
Settings button on the touchscreen and scrolling down
to ⬙Source Card Order⬙.
• Use the “View Screen” function to pull content from one
screen to the other in a single press of a button. Doing
this however will disable and gray out certain player
controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s content.
General Settings
To change source card order, select “Source Card Reorder”,
then press and hold source card on the touchscreen, and
drag and drop in desired order.
You can also adjust settings such as:
• Brightness
• Media port lighting on and off
• Clock on and off
NOTE: System information can also be displayed under
General Settings.
Remote Settings
Under this setting, you can access the following:
• Manage Remotes (this allows you to unpair remotes)
• Pair Remote
• Remote sensitivity (this adjusts the speed and sensitiv-
ity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad)
Source Card Selection
650 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect System
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player
with the label facing up, or insert a USB drive into rear
Video USB port.
NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB port
are both located under the radio controls in the instrument
panel.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the radio touch-
screen.
Refer to “Accessing The System From The Uconnect Sys-
tem” in this section for further information.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls (i.e. select
the desired source from the “Select Input 1” or “Select
Input 2” menu for the respective screen).
4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc – press the “Press to Enter”
feature in the Movie Snapshot on the radio touchscreen,
then press “OK” on the following screen. The steps to
start a DVD are dependent on the steps required by that
specific DVD. For USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie,
or Folders, then select media title from list(s).
10
MULTIMEDIA 651
5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens simultane-
ously, select “Disc” from both screen drop downs, or
choose “Disc Source” on one screen and push the “View
Screen” button on the other.
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player
1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port
Source Controls From The Uconnect System — Uconnect
Theater
652 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie
Snapshot, the control functions for that screen appears.
These controls only apply to the individual screen selected
and include:
1. Power
Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute
Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear head-
phones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and Rear
Touchscreen Controls for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to view full screen video if vehicle is not
moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video
source or when the vehicle is in motion.
5. Listen In
Select this button to play one of the rear screens audio over
the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE: To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
Uconnect System Media Control Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 653
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc, DVD or
Blu-ray, pushing the remote control’s arrow buttons will
navigate the cursor on the rear touchscreen in the desired
direction, on whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP,
DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT arrow buttons, and the OK and
MENU buttons on the remote, along with the correspond-
ing buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can be used
to navigate the disc menu when it appears. This can be
used to select specific chapters in a movie, navigate special
features, or to play the movie from the menu.
NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the
disc if already in the ⬙Disc⬙ source menu on the rear
screens, and the disc supports “auto play.”
Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are
designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to
access particular features or software on the disc. See the
documentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to
see if these buttons can be used. The 5-way control buttons
located to the right of the four colored buttons, are used to
navigate and select items in the disc’s menu, like play
movie, scene selection, etc.
Rear Touchscreen Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific
Functions
1 — Red Button
2 — Green Button
3 — Blue Button
4 — Yellow Button
5 — 5-Way Control Buttons
6 — Move 5-Way Controls But-
ton
654 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Apps
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games.
Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play each
game. Pick from games:
• Back Seat Bingo
• Checkers
• Hanging Fruit
• License Plate Game
Apps Home Screen
Sudoku App Home Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 655
• Math Flash Cards
• Solitaire
• Sudoku
• Tic Tac Toe
NOTE: To exit a game, press “Exit Button” then “Back
Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 4C NAV
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
system, the second row passengers can use “Are We There
Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time
remaining on navigation routes, as well as the estimated
time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications and
Are We There Yet? App
1 — Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
2 — Notifications ON/OFF Button
3 — Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
4 — Arrival Time
5 — Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
6 — Distance Remaining
656 MULTIMEDIA
their frequency can be set up for route information by
using the arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off
using the “Notifications” button on the “Are We There
Yet?” App. Estimated time of arrival notifications pop-up
at the bottom center of the screen.
Using The Rear Video USB Port
Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device
and play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE: To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray
disc player. The USB drive port is located under the radio
controls in the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB
device by going to the USB source. Use the search feature
to find your music faster.
Rear Video USB Port
Search Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 657
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2 ports,
located behind the first row seat.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games will exceed the
power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to
“Power Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in
this guide for further information.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
there are a number of things that can be done to trouble-
shoot the issue:
• Verify that the screen is turned on.
• Check to see that the channel is not muted.
• Make sure that the headphones are on.
• Verify that the headphone channel selector button is on
the desired channel. This button switches between the
audio of screen 1 and screen 2.
• Install two new AAA type batteries in the headphones.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
658 MULTIMEDIA
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound
can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life,
the headphones will automatically turn off approximately
three minutes after the Uconnect Theater system is turned
off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on
the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen, use
the arrow buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the OK button to select
the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top of the
remote control.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selector Button
Headphone Channel Selector Button
10
MULTIMEDIA 659
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them accord-
ing to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery
compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The
warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv.
Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is
available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS AP-
TIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limita-
tion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary
from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to
replace any discontinued Product with a comparable
660 MULTIMEDIA
model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Aptiv wireless headphones, please email
[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
Display Settings
When watching a video source, pressing “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings menu.
These settings control the appearance of the video on
the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens or
remote. To reset all values back to the original settings,
select “Reset to Defaults”, then select “YES.”
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
10
MULTIMEDIA 661
Rear Climate Controls
The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the
Uconnect Theater system. Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Icon Description
ON Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate.
OFF Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for more information.
Rear Climate Controls
662 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen
to increase or decrease the temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the
red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor
Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
10
MULTIMEDIA 663
Icon Description
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray/USB Video
system that announces a function prior to performing the
action. For further information refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia.”
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped
Your Uconnect Theater System may be equipped with
Wireless Streaming functionality that allows you to project
your smartphone or tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens. This Source Card will allow you to wirelessly
link your compatible Android devices to your Uconnect
Theater system and stream your device onto the touch-
screens.
Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on your rear
Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
Wireless Streaming Source Card
664 MULTIMEDIA
The first row passengers can also access wireless streaming
by choosing the source in the Uconnect Theater menu on
the front Uconnect touchscreen.
NOTE: For system compatibility, consult your device’s
Owner’s Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to see if
your device supports wireless streaming technology com-
patibility. Apple devices do not support this feature.
To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater touch-
screens:
1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi.
2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your device.
The name of this feature is device dependent and could
include: mirror, cast or smart view.
NOTE: Refer to your device’s Owners Manual or
www.uconnectphone.com for further information.
3. Select “Pacifica Wireless Network” from the list of
available networks on your device.
4. When prompted by an Authentication Screen, press
“Accept” on the touchscreen to begin wireless streaming
on your device. If prompted, verify that the code on the
rear touchscreen and the device match.
Streaming Source On Front Uconnect Touchscreen
Streaming Device Source Card
10
MULTIMEDIA 665
Your phone will be added as an additional source card on
the Uconnect Theater touchscreens.
NOTE: The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear
touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which “Accept” is
selected will be the primary controller for the wireless
streaming session.
NOTE:
• Some devices will allow you to control your device
through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens. They
will react to your selections from the touchscreen and be
represented on your device as well. When supported,
the Uconnect Theater task bar will appear at the top and
bottom of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, framing
your streaming device.
• Devices that do not support this feature will not respond
to Uconnect Theater touchscreen but can still be con-
trolled using the streaming device.
Settings
Below is a list of the settings available for the Wireless
Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater system:
• Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wireless feature
of the Uconnect Theater system.
• Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete the paired
devices.
• Local Network Name – Allows the user to rename the
Pacifica Wireless Network.
Wireless Streaming Settings
666 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the Uconnect
YouTube Channel at www.youtube.com/DriveUconnect
for tips and additional information on the Wireless Stream-
ing function.
BD And DVD Region Codes
Many BD and DVD discs are coded by geographic region.
These region codes must match in order for the disc to play.
If the region code for the BD or DVD disc does not match
the region code for the Blu-ray Disc player, the disc will not
play. USA and Canada are set for BD : code A / DVD : code
1.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-
ROM containing MP3, AAC or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported. Compressed audio and DivX
recorded on DVD is playable.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 2000 files and 255
folders (includes the ROOT folder) per CD-R and
CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
10
MULTIMEDIA 667
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA and AAC)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio)
files and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) from a CD Data
disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW) or DVD Data disc (usually
a DVD-R or DVD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA
files must always end with the extension “.wma” or
“.WMA” and AAC files must always end with the
extension and “.aac” or “.AAC” or “m4a”. To prevent
incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any
other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3v1, ID3v2 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 32 and 320Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 16 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control “Seek
Forward” or “Seek Back” buttons to return to the start of
the current or previous file.
• AAC (MPEG-4 AAC, Low Complexity Profile) support.
• AAC HE v1 (AAC High Efficiency v1 aka. AAC/
MPEG4v2 AAC+) support.
• HE-AAC v1, v2 support.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
668 MULTIMEDIA
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skip-
ping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tem-
perature is above 140° F (60.0° C). When this occurs, the
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the Rear
Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray
Disc player.
Product Agreement
Open Source Software
The software built into this product, are composed of
multiple software components, and there are the copy-
rights of our company or third parties in each software
component. Also, in this product, the following open
source software has been installed.
• The licensed software for our company is based on GNU
GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.0 (⬙GPL⬙).
• The licensed software for our company is based on GNU
LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.1 (⬙LGPL⬙).
• The software which has the copyrights of a third party
and is distributed as free software.
Please refer the contract details which are disclosed in the
following websites, for example, concerning these above
software. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-
2.0-standalone.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl-
2.1-standalone.html.
You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distri-
bution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.
These are distributed in the hope that it will be useful by
itself. However, including the absence of an implied war-
ranty on the ⬙suitability for a particular purpose⬙ or ⬙mer-
chantability⬙, the warranty of any kind will not be made.
You may download Source Code from the indicating URL
by the pressed button of “Open Source Software” on the
Setup Menu. Also, please refrain from contact about the
contents of the source code of open source. The source code
of the software in which there are the copyrights of our
company or third parties, is not subject to distribution.
10
MULTIMEDIA 669
kernel 2.6.16.29 FreeType 2 2.2.1 gcc sh4eb 3.4.5 glibc 2.3.5
boot_loader sh-ipl +g
1.00
libgcc_s-3.4.5 bash-3.0-31 busybox 1.00 MAKE DEV 1.1.0 module-init-tools 3.1.0
libtermcap 2.0.8 mtd-utils 20050619 initscripts 8.11.1-1 libstdc+ +3.4.5-10 libiconv 1.11
coreutils 6.9 dosfstools 2.10-3 directfb 1.0.0-rc1 kxml 1.21
binutils-sh4eb
2.16.91.0.2
v2lin 0.1 - - - -
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
For DTS patents, see http://dts.com/patents. Manufac-
tured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DVD
⬙The DVD logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.⬙ or ⬙ DVD logo is a trademark of
DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the
U.S., Japan and other countries.⬙
BDA
“Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray, BD-Live, BONUSVIEW, AVCREC
and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Associa-
tion.”
AVCHD
⬙AVCHD⬙ and the ⬙AVCHD⬙ logo are trademarks of Pana-
sonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
BD-J
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affili-
ates.
MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PAT-
ENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
670 MULTIMEDIA
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) EN-
CODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STAN-
DARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER EN-
GAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
WWW.MPEGLA.COM .
DivX
This DivX Certified device has passed rigorous testing to
ensure it plays DivX video. To play purchased DivX
movies, first register your device at http://
www.divx.com/en/vod. Find your registration code in the
DivX VOD section of your device setup menu. DivX, DivX
Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, LLC
and are used under license.
Cinavia
⬙Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia technology to
limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-
produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a
prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a
message will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology is
provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.” “This
product incorporates proprietary technology under license
from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent
7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and
pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for
certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark
of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2012 Verance
Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engi-
neering or disassembly is prohibited.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may re-
sult in hazardous radiation exposure.
10
MULTIMEDIA 671
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC/IC Regulatory Notices
Modification Statement
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless Notice
This device complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunc-
tion with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Class B Digital Device Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harm-
ful interference to radio communications. However, there
672 MULTIMEDIA
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harm-
ful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
10
MULTIMEDIA 673
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
674 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
NOTE: If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect
4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 675
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Func-
tions. For Uconnect 4C NAV System Only: Push To Begin Naviga-
tion Function
3 — Push To End Call
676 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say,
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 4 Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 677
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Uconnect 4 Media
678 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 679
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say “ Listen.” (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “ Reply.”
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
680 MULTIMEDIA
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
10
MULTIMEDIA 681
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4 Climate
682 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
10
MULTIMEDIA 683
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
684 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 685
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
SiriusXM Travel Link
686 MULTIMEDIA
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 687
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
688 MULTIMEDIA
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are
trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 689
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
690 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 691
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
692 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................694
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............694
▫ Prepare A List .........................694
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............694
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................694
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............695
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........695
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................695
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........695
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................695
▫ Service Contract .......................696
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............697
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................697
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............697
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .697
▫ In Canada ............................697
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............698
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
694 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 695
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
(Continued)
696 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 697
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
698 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................570
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .348
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............532
Additives, Fuel ............................573
Adjust
Down .................................74
Forward ................................74
Rearward ...............................74
Up....................................74
AirBag .................................265
Air Bag Operation ........................267
Air Bag Warning Light .................263, 268
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................275
Enhanced Accident Response .............280, 505
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................506
FrontAirBag ...........................268
If Deployment Occurs .....................279
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................274
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............282
Maintenance ............................282
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............264
Side Air Bags ...........................275
Transporting Pets .........................311
Air Bag Light.......................205, 263, 313
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......518
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................520
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ...................520
Air Conditioner System ......................520
Air Conditioning Filter ...................137, 521
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...............136
Air Filter ................................518
Air Pressure
Tires..................................549
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................35
Disarm The System ........................35
Security Alarm ..........................209
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................5
Android Auto .............................688
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................531, 576
Disposal ...............................534
Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) .................220
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................209
Apple CarPlay ............................690
Ashtray .................................179
Assist, Hill Start ...........................227
Audio Jack ...............................640
Audio Systems (Radio).......................584
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................92
700 INDEX
Automatic Headlights ........................99
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........135
Automatic Transaxle ........................333
Automatic Transmission ......................335
Adding Fluid ........................537, 579
Fluid And Filter Change ...................537
Fluid Change ...........................537
Fluid Level Check .....................536, 537
Fluid Type ..........................536, 579
Special Additives .........................537
AUXCord ...............................640
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........174
Axle Lubrication ...........................579
Back-Up Camera ...........................416
Battery...............................207, 515
Charging System Light ....................207
Jump Starting ...........................495
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................24
Battery Saver Feature........................101
Belts, Seat ................................312
Blind Spot Monitoring .......................229
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................523
B-Pillar Location ...........................544
Brake Assist System .........................222
Brake Control System, Electronic................221
Brake Fluid ...............................579
Brake System ..........................535, 570
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................570
Fluid Check .........................535, 579
Master Cylinder .........................535
Parking ...............................328
Warning Light ...........................205
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................334
Brightness, Interior Lights ....................103
Bulb Replacement .......................449, 453
Bulbs,
Light ........................315, 449, 453
Camera .................................416
Camera, Rear ..........................416, 419
Capacities, Fluid ...........................576
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................422, 499
Oil (Engine) ............................513
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................533
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................312, 576
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ..........................152
Cargo Area Cover ..........................152
12
INDEX 701
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .........................180
Cargo Load Floor ..........................152
Cargo Tie-Downs...........................152
Car Washes...............................564
Cellular Phone ............................673
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............455
Certification Label ..........................424
Chains, Tire ..............................559
Change Oil Indicator ........................194
Changing A Flat Tire .....................466, 538
Charging
Wireless ...............................177
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................540
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .217
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............311
Checks, Safety .............................311
Child Restraint ............................283
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................287
Center Seat LATCH .......................298
Child Seat Installation ..................301, 305
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........300
Infant And Child Restraints .................285
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......289
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........286
Seating Positions .........................288
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............307
Cigar Lighter .............................179
Clean Air Gasoline .........................573
Cleaning
Wheels ................................558
Climate Control............................108
Automatic ..........................121, 122
Manual ................................108
Rear ..............................118,131
Coat Hook ...............................173
Cold Weather Operation......................326
Compact
Disc (CD) Maintenance................692
Compact Spare Tire .........................556
Computer, Trip/Travel .......................204
Contract, Service ...........................696
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............533
Cooling System ............................530
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................532
Coolant Level ...........................534
Cooling Capacity .........................576
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................534
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................531
Inspection ..........................531, 534
702 INDEX
Points To Remember ......................534
Pressure Cap ............................533
Radiator Cap ...........................533
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......531, 576, 577
Corrosion Protection ........................563
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .................348
Cruise Light ...........................214, 215
Customer Assistance ........................694
Cybersecurity .............................585
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ..............104
Daytime Running Lights ......................97
Dealer Service .............................516
Defroster, Windshield........................313
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...................105
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................216
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...............................97
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................514
Disable Vehicle Towing ......................503
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................534
Disturb..................................687
Door Ajar.............................206, 208
Door Ajar Light ........................206, 208
Drag And Drop Menu .......................584
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................50
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................439
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).........641
Electric Brake Control System ..................221
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................220
Traction Control System ....................221
Electric Parking Brake .......................328
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................94
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........346
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............224
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........207
Emer
gency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................443
Jacking .........................466, 468, 538
Jump Starting ...........................495
Overheating ............................499
Towing ................................503
Emission Control System Maintenance............217
Engine ..................................513
Air Cleaner .............................518
Block Heater ............................327
12
INDEX 703
Break-In Recommendations .................328
Checking Oil Level .......................514
Compartment ...........................513
Compartment Identification .................513
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................577
Cooling ...............................530
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................312, 576
Fails To Start ............................326
Flooded, Starting .........................326
Fuel Requirements ........................572
Oil ............................516, 576, 577
Oil Filler Cap ...........................513
Oil Filter ...............................518
Oil Selection .........................516, 576
Oil Synthetic ............................517
Overheating ............................499
Starting ...............................321
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................517
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................517
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........280, 505
Ethanol..................................574
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................312, 576
Exhaust System ........................312, 529
Exterior Lighting ........................97, 453
Exterior Lights ...................97, 315, 449, 453
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................518
Air Conditioning .....................137, 521
Engine Oil ..........................518, 577
Engine Oil Disposal .......................518
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................443
Turn Signals ...................97, 215, 315, 453
Flash-To-Pass ............................97, 99
Flooded Engine Starting ......................326
Fluid, Brake ..............................579
Fluid
Capacities............................576
Fluid Leaks...............................315
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................535
Fluids And Lubricants .......................577
Fog Lights..........................97, 100, 454
Fog Lights, Service .........................454
Fold-Flat Seats .............................50
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ...............63
Forward Collision Warning....................237
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................501
Front Position Light .........................453
704 INDEX
Fuel ....................................572
Additives ..............................573
Clean Air ..............................573
Ethanol ...............................574
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................422
Gasoline ...............................572
Materials Added .........................573
Methanol ..............................574
Octane Rating ........................572, 577
Requirements ...........................572
Specifications ...........................577
Tank Capacity ...........................576
Fuses ...................................456
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............160
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....................422
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................573
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................572
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................573
Gear Ranges ..............................336
Glass Cleaning ............................567
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................426
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................426
GVWR ..................................424
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................439
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................443
Headlights ................................97
Bulb Replacement ........................451
Cleaning ...............................564
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........97
Lights On Reminder ....................97, 100
Passing ..............................97, 99
Replacing ..............................451
Switch .................................97
Time Delay ..............................97
Washers ................................99
Head Restraints ............................
85
Heated Mirrors ..........................92, 95
Heater, Engine Block ........................327
Hill Start Assist ............................227
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................428
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............160
Hood Prop ...............................145
Hood Release .............................145
Hook, Coat ...............................173
12
INDEX 705
Ignition ..................................28
Switch .................................28
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................92, 443
Instrument Cluster..........................191
Descriptions ............................215
Display ...............................192
Menu Items ............................197
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................566
Interior And Instrument Lights .................101
Interior Appearance Care .....................565
Interior Lights .............................101
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..............105
Introduction ................................4
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ........................18
Inverter
Power ................................177
Jack Location .............................466
Jack Operation .........................466, 538
Jump Starting .............................495
KeyFob..................................20
Arm The System ..........................35
Disarm The Alarm ........................35
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........26, 34
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....24
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......26
Keys ....................................20
Replacement .............................34
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................97
Lane Change Assist ......................97, 101
LaneSense................................412
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................249
Latches..................................315
Hood .................................145
Lead Free Gasoline .........................572
Leaks, Fluid ..............................315
Life Of Tires ..............................552
Liftgate..................................146
Power ................................148
Light Bulbs ...........................315,
453
Lighter
Cigar .................................179
Lights...................................315
AirBag.........................205, 263, 313
Battery Saver ...........................101
Brake Assist Warning ......................226
Brake Warning ..........................205
706 INDEX
Bulb Replacement .....................449, 453
Center Mounted Stop ......................455
Cruise .............................214, 215
Daytime Running .........................97
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................97
Engine Temperature Warning ................207
Exterior ............................315, 453
Fog ...............................100, 454
Headlights ........................97, 99, 451
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................97
Instrument Cluster ........................97
Intensity Control .........................103
Interior ................................101
Lights On Reminder ....................97, 100
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........211
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ............104
Park ..................................215
Passing ..............................97, 99
Reading ...............................101
Seat Belt Reminder .......................208
Security Alarm ..........................209
Service ................................449
Side Marker ............................453
SmartBeams .............................98
Traction Control .........................226
Turn Signals ...................97, 215, 315, 453
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .207, 215
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................152
Loading Vehicle ........................152, 424
Tires..................................544
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................202
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................202
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............202
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............202
Low Tire Pressure System.....................241
Lubrication, Body ..........................523
Luggage Carrier ...........................180
Lug
Nuts ................................571
Maintenance Free Battery .....................515
Maintenance Schedule .......................509
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).....211,217
Manual
Park Release ............................500
Service ................................698
Map/Reading Lights ........................101
Marker Lights, Side .........................453
Media Hub ...............................640
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................50
Memory Seat ............................50, 94
12
INDEX 707
Memory Seats And Radio .....................50
Methanol ................................574
Mini-Trip Computer.........................204
Mirrors ..................................92
Automatic Dimming .......................92
Electric Remote ...........................94
Exterior Folding ..........................95
Heated ..............................92, 95
Outside ..............................92, 93
Rearview ............................92, 443
Vanity .................................96
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................241
Mopar Parts ..............................697
MP3 Control ..............................640
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................97
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................328
Occupant Restraints.........................246
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............572, 577
Oil Change Indicator ........................194
Reset .................................194
Oil, Engine............................516, 577
Capacity ...............................576
Change Interval .........................516
Checking ..............................514
Disposal ...............................518
Filter ..............................518, 577
Filter Disposal ...........................518
Identification Logo .......................517
Materials Added To .......................517
Pressure Warning Light ....................209
Recommendation .....................516, 576
Synthetic ..............................517
Viscosity ...........................517, 576
Oil Filter, Change ..........................518
Oil Filter, Selection..........................518
Oil Pressure Light ..........................209
Onboar
d Diagnostic System ...................216
Operating Precautions .......................216
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................5,698
Outside Rearview Mirrors...................92, 93
Overheating, Engine ........................499
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)...............5
Paint Care................................563
Parking Brake .............................328
708 INDEX
ParkSense System, Rear ...................368, 378
Personalized Main Menu .....................584
Pets ....................................311
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........544
Power
Brakes ................................570
Inverter ...............................177
Mirrors ................................94
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............174
Seats ................................73, 75
Steering ...............................341
Power Seats
Down .................................74
Forward ................................74
Rearward ...............................74
Up....................................74
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .......................45, 148
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................258
Preparation For Jacking ......................467
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................259
Radial Ply Tires ............................550
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............533
Radio Frequency
General Information ................27, 33, 34, 43
Radio Operation ...........................673
Rear Air Conditioning ....................118,131
Rear Camera ..............................419
Rear Cross Path............................235
Rear ParkSense System ...................368, 378
Rear Seat Removal ..........................53
Rear View ................................92
Reclining Front Seats .........................51
Recreational Towing.........................437
Reformulated Gasoline.......................573
Refrigerant ...............................520
Release, Hood .............................145
Reminder, Lights On .........................97
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................248
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................30
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm
The Alarm ..........................35
Disarm The Alarm ........................35
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........26, 34
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................32
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......33
12
INDEX 709
Uconnect Settings .........................33
Remote Starting System .......................30
Replacement Bulbs .........................449
Replacement Keys ...........................34
Replacement Tires ..........................553
Reporting Safety Defects .....................697
Restraints, Child ...........................283
Restraints, Head ............................85
Roof Luggage Rack .........................180
Rotation, Tires.............................560
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................312
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................315
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................697
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................312
Safety Information, Tire ......................538
Safety Tips ...............................311
Schedule, Maintenance.......................509
Seat Belt Reminder .........................208
Seat Belts .............................247, 312
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................253
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........253
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......253
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........259
Child Restraints .........................283
Energy Management Feature ................259
Extender ...............................258
Front Seat .......................247, 249, 251
Inspection ..............................312
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................251
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................249
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............253
Operating Instructions .....................251
Pregnant Women .........................258
Pretensioners ...........................259
Rear Seat ..............................249
Reminder ..............................248
Seat
Belt Extender ........................258
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................259
Untwisting Procedure .....................253
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................565
Seats ...............................50, 74, 81
Adjustment ......................50, 52, 53, 74
Bench .................................53
Heated .................................81
Power ...............................73, 75
Rear Folding .............................50
Reclining ...............................51
Seatback Release .....................50, 52, 53
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ...................63
710 INDEX
Tilting ...............................50, 52
Security Alarm ............................209
Arm The System ..........................35
Disarm The System ........................35
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............577
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................34
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................33
Sentry Key Replacement ......................34
Service Assistance ..........................694
Service Contract ...........................696
Service Manuals ...........................698
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ....................335
Shoulder Belts.............................249
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................92
Signals, Turn.....................97, 215, 315, 453
Siri.....................................686
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert .......................685
SmartBeams ...............................98
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................559
Snow Tires ...............................555
Spare Tires .....................467, 555, 556, 557
Spark Plugs ..............................577
Specifications
Oil...................................577
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................353
Cancel ................................348
Resume ...............................348
Speed Control (Cruise Control)..............346, 348
Starting ...............................30, 321
Button .................................28
Cold Weather ...........................326
Engine Fails To Start ......................326
Remote ................................30
Starting And Operating ......................321
Starting Procedures .........................321
Steering .................................341
Tilt Column .............................90
Wheel,
Heated ...........................90
Wheel, Tilt ..............................90
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................639
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .639
Storage, Vehicle ............................136
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .................63
Stow ‘n Vac...............................152
Stuck, Freeing .............................501
Sunglasses Storage..........................180
12
INDEX 711
Sun Roof ................................141
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........265
Sway Control, Trailer ........................229
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................517
System, Remote Starting ......................30
Telescoping Steering Column ...................90
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...........135
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ......................152
Tilt Steering Column .........................90
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................97
Tire And Loading Information Placard............544
Tire Markings .............................538
Tires..........................315, 548, 555, 561
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................552
Air Pressure ............................548
Chains ................................559
Changing ...........................466, 538
Compact Spare ..........................556
General Information ...................548, 555
High Speed .............................550
Inflation Pressure ........................549
Jacking .........................466, 468, 538
Life Of Tires ............................552
Load Capacity .......................544, 545
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .197, 212, 241
Quality Grading .........................561
Radial ................................550
Replacement ............................553
Rotation ...............................560
Safety .............................538, 548
Sizes .................................540
Snow Tires .............................555
Spare Tires ......................467, 555, 557
Spinning ...............................551
Trailer Towing ...........................433
Tread Wear Indicators .....................552
Wheel
Nut Torque ........................571
Tire Safety Information.......................538
Tire Service Kit ............................484
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................432
To Open Hood ............................145
Towing ..................................426
Disabled Vehicle .........................503
Guide .................................429
Recreational ............................437
Weight ................................429
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................437
Traction ..............................438, 439
712 INDEX
Traction Control ...........................221
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................229
Trailer Towing.............................426
Cooling System Tips ......................437
Hitches ................................428
Minimum Requirements ....................432
Tips ..................................436
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................432
Wiring ................................435
Trailer Towing Guide ........................429
Trailer Weight .............................429
Transaxle
Automatic .............................333
Operation ..............................333
Transmission ..............................335
Automatic ..........................335, 536
Maintenance ............................536
Transporting Pets...........................311
Tread Wear Indicators .......................552
Turn Signals ........................97, 215, 453
Uconnect
Theater ................................641
Uconnect Settings ......................33, 586
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display........613
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display ................587
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..........33, 586
Uconnect Voice Command ....................675
Umbrella Holder ...........................169
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................561
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........160
Universal Transmitter........................160
Unleaded Gasoline .........................572
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................253
USB....................................640
Vacuum .................................152
Stow ‘n Vac ............................152
V
anity Mirrors .............................96
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............570
Vehicle Loading ........................424, 545
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Storage ............................136
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ...........................18
Navigation ..............................18
Operating Instructions ......................18
Searching User Guide ......................18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................517
12
INDEX 713
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................675
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .210
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................697
Washers, Windshield ........................514
Washing Vehicle ...........................564
Water
Driving Through .........................439
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................558
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................558
Wind Buffeting ............................143
Window Fogging...........................136
Windshield Defroster ........................313
Windshield Washers .....................104, 514
Fluid .................................514
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................524
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................524
Wipers, Intermittent .....................104, 105
Wireless Charging Pad .......................177
Wrecker Towing ...........................503
714 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
First Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19RU-126-AA
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
